Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. and piping. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. and plumbing fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. 3 . Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. such as mechanical equipment. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. electrical panels. such as duct. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. After completing each exercise. as well as how to open and save them. Create detail views. You do not design entire systems. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. When you open a training file. However. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. annotations. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Metric file names have an _m suffix. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. and tags. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. your Training folder may be in a different location. Create schedules. however. When you install the training files as instructed. In this exercise. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. For example. templates. For example.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. you can choose to save your work. is located and accessed in the training files location. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . On the Contents tab. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and sheets to document the project. So. when you add ductwork. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. to provide a richer and more finished design. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. you learn where the training files are located. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. views. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. NOTE Depending on your installation. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. such as templates and families. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. if you open settings. For File name. 8 If you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click the Training Files icon. For Files of type. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. You may close the file with or without saving changes. you are prompted to save the changes.rvt) is selected. 3 In the right pane. a list of file types displays. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Imperial or Metric. click ➤ Save As. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.rvt and make changes.rvt. select the folder in which to save the new file. verify that Project Files (*. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and click Open. scroll down. and you can open any supported file type. enter the new file name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 4 Click the training file name. the Open dialog displays.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. and click Save. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. For example.

6 .

This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the floor or roof remains connected.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. 2D and 3D view. drawings. hence. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the parameter is one of association or connection. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. quantities. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the hierarchy of elements. scope. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. If the length of the elevation is changed. the operation of the software is parametric. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In this case. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and phases when you need it. sections. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In the Revit MEP model. ■ ■ 7 . Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. If you move the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and plans. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and schedules required for a building project. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. drawing sheets. every drawing sheet. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. You learn the terminology. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. schedules. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In this case.

without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. and keynotes are annotation elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. dimensions.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. For example. boilers. When you change something. and electrical panels. Datum elements help to define project context. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and reference planes are datum elements. ducts. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . boilers. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. levels. walls and ceilings are hosts. tags. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They help to describe or document the design. sprinklers. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sprinklers. Examples include detail lines. and electrical panels. sinks. filled regions. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. sinks. ducts. dimensions. grids. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. tags.

you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. If you can draw. for example. you can explicitly control them. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. To place levels. Most often. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. elevation views. you must be in a section or elevation view. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. By using a single project file. floors. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . In Revit MEP. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. schedules. and so forth). For example. This information includes components used to design the model. The project file contains all information for the building design. views of the project. families. and types. such as roofs. section views. from geometry to construction data. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. or bottom of foundation. you do nothing to establish these relationships. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. top of wall. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. and ceilings. Project: In Revit MEP. However. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. and drawings of the design. programming is not required. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In other cases. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. North . by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Often.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. first floor.

pipes. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. For example. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. However.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. hiding. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A type can also be a style. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. System families include ducts. System families can be transferred between projects. and wires. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. A type can be a specific size of a family. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. showing. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. or layer the views to see only the one on top. identical use. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . each in-place family contains only a single type. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Unlike system and standard component families. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. You can also display several project views at one time. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Then experiment with them. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. With a few clicks. such as a A0 title block. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). and similar graphical representation. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work.

and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To return the panel to the ribbon.

and settings. and for switching views. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. data and systems. project and system parameters. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. then select what you want to modify. tools used for editing existing elements. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. When working on the Modify tab. architect-specific tools.. select the tool first. and CAD files.. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.

a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. when adding duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. By default. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. displays frequently used tools. To keep a panel expanded. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example. provides access to common tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.

such as Export and Publish.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click. (Open) save the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a template and create a new drawing.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu... select a file to open. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Export) On the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing..

annotation.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. to. or template file. click. and Walkthrough. (Publish) print the current drawing. but is not enabled by default. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. saves a current project. (Print) access product and license information. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. publish the current project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.On the application menu.. provides views including Default 3D. or template file. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. Camera. (Licensing) close the file. To enable or disable a tool item. family.. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .. annotation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.

Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. To hide the Status Bar. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon.To undo or redo a series of operations. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. This displays the command history in a list. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. check the Status Bar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. repeat the command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. when you switch to another editing mode. Clipboard. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. displaying the same information. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Starting with the most recent command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Group. However. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. To show the Status Bar again. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . workshared components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. or the Family Editor. When you are using a command. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Clear the Status Bar check mark. In addition. When you are highlighting an element or component. Modify.

for example. select one or more elements of the same category. click (Modify). Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.To cancel or exit the current command. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Place a Wall. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. When you place an element in a drawing. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. On the Quick Access toolbar. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 1 Click ➤ Open.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . After you are familiar with these tasks. In the following steps. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. For example. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.rvt. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. click Training Files. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. There are several ways to access zoom options.

you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. When you release the mouse button. 9 To display SteeringWheels. on the Navigation bar. use a zoom menu command to zoom out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 6 Click in the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. In the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. click . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Modifying the View | 19 . If you do not have a wheel mouse. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). this is referred to as a crossing selection.

and click tin the Options dialog. and then using the Zoom tool again. moving the wheel to the desired location. click the SteeringWheels tab. To define settings for SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. ➤ Options. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. For more information about SteeringWheels. press ESC. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Click and drag to orbit the design. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 11 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . bottoms.Design. Small blue dots. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. These are the drag controls. Similar controls. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. and select the duct. referred to as shape handles. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . display along the ends. as shown. 2 Enter ZR. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. After you are familiar with these tasks. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. called drag controls. and open Level 2 .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

or press CTRL+Z. In this example.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). click the Undo command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. select the first item in the list. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move.

such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .Some commands. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and drag it to the left as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. 10 Move the cursor to the right. 11 With the duct already selected. as shown. you want to move the duct. for example. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. In this case. click to specify the starting position. The duct is moved to the new position.

Return. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . For example. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Select Mechanical . 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.End a command Some commands.Supply. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. such as the Modify Ducts command. 14 Enter VG. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 13 To end a command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

and open North. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions.rte template. You can choose from several templates. click Training files. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select Project. You can either select a template from the template library. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 2 In the New Project dialog. settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. such as the default project units and settings. use copy/monitor. In that case. system families. under Create new. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 27 . and open Metric ➤ Templates. create and manage views. and modify system settings. 7 In the Project Browser. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. 6 Click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as coordination review and interference checking. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and click Open. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. the default building levels and standard views. and loadable families. and geometry from the starting template. New projects inherit all the families. under Template file. Finally. such as ducts and pipes. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. link files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. 5 In the New Project dialog. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.

10 Using the same method. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Click Cancel. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. navigate to Metric Templates. click Edit. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. NH. If you want to use a template other than the default. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. for Energy Data. select Manchester. Click OK. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. review the construction materials listed. ■ For Building Construction.rte template and click Open. under Energy Analysis. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. For Location. click Browse. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. ■ ■ Under Create new. Click OK twice. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Level 1. For example. click (Browse). and select the Systems-Default_Metric. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Project template.8 In the drawing area. select School or University. for City. In the Choose Template dialog. create another new project using the Construction template. When you select the material. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. you can select it now. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. (Browse). ■ ■ For Ground Plane.

00 mm. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.00 mm.00 mm. 27 Click OK. Holding CTRL. 33 Click OK.rfa and click Open. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Click OK twice. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. For Categories. power distribution systems. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 26 In the right pane. 110. click Sizes. piping. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 260. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. select Views. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . and 140. for 90. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems.00 mm. 290. 23 In the left pane. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 25 In the left pane.000 mm. 24 In the right pane. and 310. under Pipe Settings. click Round. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. for 20. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.00 mm. under Duct Settings. select Identity Data. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 140.00 mm. click Rectangular. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. under Duct Settings. for 90.00 mm.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.00 mm. 22 In the right pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.00 mm. and demand factors for electrical systems. wiring. 110. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Wiring. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. plumbing.

Notice that the file is saved as a template. For Then by. under Create new. under Template file. select Project. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog.Origin to Origin.rvt. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. From the Positioning list.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. and groups that are contained in a project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. select View Name. select Associated Level. In addition. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Auto . select Sub-Discipline. 5 Click OK. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 38 Close the file. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. For Then by. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training. select Family and Type. families. click Browse. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 4 In the New Project dialog. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . To enable this coordination. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Click Open. For Sort by. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. sheets.

under Constraints. select Room Bounding. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. Linking Projects | 31 .The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. select the linked architectural model. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.Mech. 8 If necessary. 12 Click OK. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog.Floor.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. click the level line for 03. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 19 On the left side of the view. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 17 On the Options Bar.

then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. If you modify a monitored element. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. click By Host View. appears above the copied elements. and that the copied elements are monitored. and the level 4. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. highlight the linked model. 34 On the Basics tab. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. indicating that a relationship is established. 27 In the drawing area. indicating that an element has changed. a warning message displays. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. for the link file. level 3. warnings notify you of any violations. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. and click to select the linked model. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Custom. Linking Projects | 33 .Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 29 In the drawing area. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. After copying. select Custom. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link.

Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 3 In the View templates dialog. Site. click Edit. and Topography. 5 On the Basics tab. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. 36 Click OK. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Under Visibility. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Click OK. click Custom.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. deselect Parking. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 7 Click OK twice. Select Show categories from all disciplines. for Name. Under Visibility. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Roads. Planting. deselect Levels. click Custom. select Custom. Click OK. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. 2 In the New View Template dialog. for the link file. under View Properties.

Modifying General System Options In this exercise. journal cleanup options. 8 Click ➤ Options. click the Graphics tab. These settings control the graphics. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. under Template file. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. click Training Files. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 2 In the Options dialog.rte.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. Modifying System Settings | 35 . 3 Under Colors. 7 Click OK. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. they are not saved to project files or template files. select Mechanical and click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click OK. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. click the Graphics tab. selection default options. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. and your username when using worksharing. Notice that the drawing area is black. under View Templates. 9 In the Options dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. notification preferences. click Browse. 5 In the New Project dialog. select Invert background color.

NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. select None. select One hour. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. the elements causing the error display using this color. and click OK. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 21 Close the file without saving it. 14 Click OK. family template files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. When an error occurs.10 Under Colors. However. 17 Press ESC to end the command. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. and family libraries. 2 In the Options dialog. including your default project template. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 12 Click the General tab. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. you specify default file locations. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 11 In the Color dialog. 13 Under Notifications. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall. click the File Locations tab. select yellow. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. For Tooltip assistance. click the value for Selection color.

Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. 5 Under Default path for user files. select the folder to save your files to by default. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Specifying File Locations | 37 . centralized. click Browse. Load. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you can start a new project with that template. When you are opening. Save. click Browse. You can modify the existing library names and path. Click and click Browse to select a template. 7 In the Options dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. click Places. saving. and Import dialogs. In the following illustration. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. under Default path for family template files. click Browse. such as in a large. ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. and you can create new libraries. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.3 Under Default template file. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. TIP To view a template. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. or loading a Revit MEP file. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 10 In the Places dialog. 8 Click Cancel. However. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 4 Click Cancel. note the list of library names.

and click (Browse). click (Add Value). or families. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click My Library. and click OK twice. and select it as the library path. Save. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load. 15 Under Library Name. templates. click the My Library icon. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and Import dialogs. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click Open. ➤ Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects.11 In the Places dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and change the name to My Library.

The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 5 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. custom color files. select Ignore words in uppercase. 3 Under Settings. specify the new location here.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 23 Click 24 Click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 21 On the File Locations tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. such as bump maps. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Edit. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Places. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 11 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. 22 Select My Library. and decal image files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 9 In the text editor. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. If you work in a large office. view the current path. 14 Click in the drawing area. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 8 Under Building industry dictionary. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 19 Click Cancel. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 12 Create a new project using the default template. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click OK. This path is determined during installation. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 27 Click OK. If you want to relocate this path. 20 Click ➤ Options. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP.

click Close. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. under Dimension Snaps. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click File menu ➤ Save. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 2 In the New Project dialog. 19 In the Options dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. As you zoom in and out within a view. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Edit. 6 In the Snaps dialog. you modify snap increments. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify snap settings. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Browse. click the Spelling tab.rte. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. click OK. under Template file. In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. click OK. 24 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. You can turn snap settings on and off. and enter 500 . 22 In the text editor. 20 Under Settings. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Restore Defaults. 25 Close the file without saving it. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 23 In the text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 .. work with snapping turned off.17 In the Spelling dialog.

10 On the Options Bar. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. While sketching. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. For example. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. If it does not. and move the cursor to the right. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. This is the increment that you added previously. such as ZO to zoom out. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall.7 Under Object Snaps. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. use the wheel button on your mouse. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. deselect Chain. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. zoom out until it does so. TIP To zoom while sketching. click OK. If you do not have a wheel button. enter SM.

26 Close the file. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and the wall edges. 22 Move the cursor downward. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. with or without saving it. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Do not set the wall end point. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint.. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. it will snap to the endpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. If you move the cursor along the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 25 Click OK. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and move the cursor to the right. the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and specify the wall endpoint. 19 Enter SM. and delete the value 500 . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

In this exercise. As you create the mechanical system. However. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial.autodesk. you design a mechanical system for an office building. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. and then you create a plenum level. go to http://www. duct system and a hydronic piping system. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this lesson. you first configure the linked architectural model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. At the end of the tutorial. methodology. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. If the tutorial training files are not present. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This system consists of a cooling tower. you first plan the system. water source heat pump (WSHP). By following the recommended workflow. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 45 . Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you will understand the process. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. After finishing each exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. After applying a color scheme to the zones.

and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you add a level for plenums. select Room Bounding. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Constraints. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. In this section. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP .Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). not in the MEP training file. and double-click West . click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE When working with a linked file. 6 In the Project Browser. ceilings. 1 In the Project Browser. click to select it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.MEP.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and click OK. Next.Space Plan is highlighted. roof. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.

■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. enter 2600mm. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. The new level is placed. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Verify that Make Plan View is selected.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 16 Press Esc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and click OK. Click Plan View Types. 9 On the Draw panel. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Plenum. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and click Properties. For Offset. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and in the Plan View Types dialog. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.

verify that 1 : 100 is selected. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. 20 In the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. Under Extents. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. In this exercise. For Sub-Discipline. Under View Depth. for View Scale. For Cut plane.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. click Edit. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. right-click Level 2 Plenum. for Level. select Design. select MEP . In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. Under Identity Data. enter 0. for Top. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. and then place spaces in various types of areas. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. for Default View Template. select Plenum Plan. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. select Level Above (Level 3). ■ Click OK twice. In the next exercise. for View Range. and for Offset. you place spaces in areas of the building model. For View Classification.Plenum. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and click Apply Default View Template. you can choose to save your work. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . However. enter an Offset of 300mm. NOTE After finishing each exercise.

Placing Spaces | 49 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. walls. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset.rvt. select New.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For (Tag Location). For Space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Horizontal. enter 0. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. click Training Files. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select Level 2 Plenum. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Upper Limit. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Space Plan is highlighted. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and ceilings).

9 Select the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. for Number. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Library. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. For Name.7 Click to place the space. ensuring coordination between the files. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Click OK.

Placing Spaces | 51 . For Offset. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. and then click Modify. For Upper Limit. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Using the method learned previously. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. select Level 3. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. and then split the space using a space separation line.

verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. for Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then press Esc. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m.Space Plan is highlighted. select Level 3. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and for Offset.rvt. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . click Training Files.

click in the name column. and select Corridor. In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. and change the space number to 216A. 10 Click in the number column. and scroll to the newly placed space. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 9 In the schedule. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

11 Close the schedule view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. as shown. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 15 Press Esc twice. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.

The new space is numbered correctly (216B). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. you place a space in a chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.16 Using the method learned previously. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. place a space in the lower area of the split space.

Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If necessary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m.rvt. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.

add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Interior and Reference. and then click OK. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. enter 0.4 Press Esc. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 10 In the plan view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click in the chase area to place the space. select Roof Level. right-click. select Level 3. In the plan view. On the Options Bar. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select the space. expand Spaces. for Upper Limit. 6 Enter VG. 12 Click in the section view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Upper Limit. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Offset. and click Element Properties.

Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . enter 225PC. floors. Bounding elements (such as walls.■ For Limit Offset. enter 1200. 17 Type ZF. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. for Name. All spaces in the view are tagged. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Under Identity Data. ceilings.Space Plan. 15 Press Esc. under Loaded Tags. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . and maximize the view. enter Chase. and click OK. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. For Number. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. under Spaces. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. In this exercise. click View ➤ Zones. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Zoning is highlighted. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. which removes the space from the Default zone. To display space reference lines. click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After a space is placed in an area. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.20 Close the file with or without saving it. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the next exercises. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Notice that Default is currently the only zone. click Reference. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a new zone is created. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . double-click 121 Cafeteria.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that the space is occupiable. click Reference. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Energy Analysis. The Zone tool is active. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Next. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. As you do this. To display space reference lines.rvt. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The graphic in the System Browser updates. and click OK. select Occupiable. under Spaces. you assign spaces to zones in the building. you assign spaces to a zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. ) or 5 In the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. indicating that it’s the active view.

NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 4 In the drawing area. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). select HVAC Zones. To view the zone in the drawing area. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and Electrical 220 spaces. Expand HVAC Zones. Using the Edit Zone tab. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Instruction 221. 5 With the drawing area active. you can add or remove a space from the zone. In the System Browser. you need to activate the zone visibility. and modify the zone properties. type VG. and click Finish Editing Zone. Click OK. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. select Computer Lab 222. Instruction.

West . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 9 In the System Browser. 5 Click in the Level 1 . click Finish Editing Zone. You activated zone visibility in the views. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.West .Zoning view to activate it. under Spaces.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. click Training Files. In this exercise. 11 Close the System Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Identity Data. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Zoning is highlighted. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.rvt. click Reference. expand 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. To display space reference lines.Area B.TIP After you finish editing the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. for Name. enter 2 . 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.

Select Attached End. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning floor plan. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. zoom out. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 15 Press Esc. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. click in the Level 2 .Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 8 In the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.

for Name Value. In this exercise. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. enter Lounge . on the ViewCube. and click OK. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.rvt. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and zone information. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1 . Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. verify that Wireframe is selected.Zoning to make it the active view. double-click the zone tag. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. space. you verify the building. Front. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and select 109 Lounge. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning view. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.East. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). click the corner where the Top. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .

click (Isolate). All spaces in the zone display in isolation. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you isolate the space. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. With 109 Lounge selected. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. select 1_South_Area C. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Using the Highlight tool. ■ ■ On the Details tab. Next.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Click (Highlight).

11 °C : 32. For Cooling Information. verify that <Building> is selected. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that 23. ■ ■ ■ Next. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Heating Information. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). click . verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. This indicates the heating set point. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. the zone information displays for the selected zone. outdoor air per area. and then click OK. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and dehumidification set point. verify that 21. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.33 °C : 12. click (Shading). scroll down in the left pane. Below the list of spaces and zones.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. heating air temperature. cooling air temperature. the space information displays for the selected space. Next. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and humidification set point. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.22 °C : N/A is specified. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. Next. select Lounge/Recreation. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and click OK. and then click OK. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and in the People dialog. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and air changes per hour.22 °C : N/A is specified. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. For People. For Construction Type. click . Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. For Electrical Loads. click . select 109 Lounge.

roofs. 12 Using the methods learned previously.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. floors. select Level 3. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. open MEP . and other room-bounding components. click Cancel. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 0. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 15 In the Project Browser.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.

it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select space Plenum 212P. you verified building. and zone information. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. space. Click OK. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise. select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. For Name. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Under Energy Analysis. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. select Plenum. for Number. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Because this is an unoccupied space. enter 212P. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for City. under Energy Analysis. For Ground Plane. and click OK. For Sliver Space Tolerance. for Building Service. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. On the Place tab. For Project Phase. verify that Manchester.rvt. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. select School or University. On the Weather tab. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. In order to select a space. click Training Files. 8 In the drawing area. is selected. For Location. If. you need to select this option. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. right-click. under Volume Computations. for Energy Data. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. For Export Complexity. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. double-click Level 2 . this option adjusts the times automatically. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. verify that 300 is specified. verify that Level 1 is selected. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . enter 03101. click Edit. and click Element Properties. verify that New Construction is selected. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. select space Library 219. Click OK twice. For Building Construction.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting).Space Plan. verify that <Building> is specified. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. click in the Value field. NH. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Postal Code.

10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.Audio Visual. click Edit. for Values. For People. verify that Occupiable is selected. click in the Value column. both. m. 12 Click the Details tab. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. click Edit. select Heated and cooled. a cooling load. Next. NH. select Specified. verify that School or University is selected. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Specified. For Space Type. You have verified the building information. verify that <Building> is specified. For Latent. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Select the space associated with the warning. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. Under Power. for Values. For Building Service. and enter 15 sq. and click to learn the cause for the warning. verify that Manchester. for Values. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 45 W. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. For Building Construction. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. and then click . and click OK. Click OK. For Condition Type. select Library . Select Area per person. select Actual. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). is specified. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . or neither. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 60 W. Click OK twice. select Actual. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Location.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Sensible. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.

click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods.Space Plan. space. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and zone information for the building model. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 16 After you review the loads report. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and a loads report displays. click Information). you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ Select 2_Middle_Library.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and under Heating Information. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and click OK. 17 In the loads report. weather. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. There should be no warnings displayed. click Calculate. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. or zone information. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building.11°C. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. under Energy Analysis. You should correct the space error in the building model. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. 19 In the drawing area. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. select 219 Library. 21 Click OK. space. and can be modified here. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 15 Review the loads report for project. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. or make any changes to the model. In this exercise. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. select 219 Library.

4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . in relatively small increments. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. select HVAC Zones. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. For Color Scheme. Click OK.rvt. 3 In the drawing area. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 5 Zoom in to the legend.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. select Cooling Load . and click OK. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Expanded Ranges. The new scheme displays in the view. under Schemes.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

In this exercise. 11 Using the method learned previously. In the next exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. click Training Files. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

For Formula. Under Available fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Select Formula. For Type. select Spaces. for Select available fields from. select Spaces. select New Construction. for Formula. more category options are available. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Select Schedule building components. enter . For Name. and click OK.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Discipline. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Airflow Delta.Space Fill is the active view. enter Space Airflow Schedule. select Air Flow. ■ Click Calculated Value. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. click (Browse). Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Phase. select HVAC. Click OK. In the Fields dialog. In the Schedule Properties dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. In the Calculated Value dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. and then click .

Click OK twice. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and click OK. Header. and Blank line. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Level. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select Airflow Delta. For Background Color. Under Conditions to Use. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. For Value. In the Color dialog. For Fields. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Not Between. a view opens that contains the selected space. click the color swatch. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. right-click to access schedule properties. and then click Conditional Format. For Then by. ■ The schedule displays. Select Ascending. verify that Show is highlighted. select red. select Number. and then select Hidden field. select Level. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 .

7 Close the file with or without saving it. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In later exercises. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the next lesson. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In this exercise. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and work with the airflow schedule. After completing the air systems lesson. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. As you place the air terminals. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). In this lesson. you will create supply air systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 79 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you modify air terminal parameters. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After system creation.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Then.

Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 3 In the ceiling view.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Training Files. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and scroll to space 223. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.

as shown. enter 215 L/s. 17 Move the cursor down. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. verify that Constrain is cleared. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . which in this case is the ceiling grid. and press Enter. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 15 On the Options Bar. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. select the diffuser.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. click Place on Face. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. the hosted elements are updated as well. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 9 On the Placement panel. type 3600. and then select both Copy and Multiple.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. for Flow. and press Enter. and then press Esc to end the command. If the host element is modified or moved. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Also. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 24 In the Open dialog. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and click Open. click Yes. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. select one of the diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Place 2 diffusers. As you place the return diffusers. click Place on Face. 21 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. Next. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.rfa. as shown. 28 On the Placement tab. 25 In the drawing area. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . 22 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. clear Leader. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click to select the lines. as shown. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select one of the return diffusers. and click OK. 31 In the alert dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select Strong Reference. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Yes. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . Level. for Reference. under Other. 32 In the Project Browser. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.

42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. select the vertical grid line as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. as shown. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then press Esc twice. 40 In the drawing area. 43 Using the same method. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. align the other return diffuser.

you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. and on the Options Bar. As you place the air terminals. and click OK. clear LeftArrow. 47 Using the same method. under Mechanical.44 While pressing Ctrl. and press Enter. for Flow. enter 310 L/s. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. select both return diffusers. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . right-click. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Element Properties. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Tag on Placement is selected.Design to make it the active view. the space crossing lines display. and double-click Level 1 . click Training Files. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Type Selector. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. click 1 : 100. 10 In the drawing area. select M_Supply Diffuser . 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.HVAC Plan .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .200 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.rvt. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. at the lower left corner of the building. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. expand HVAC . When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.

NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used.Airflow. for Offset. 15 Press Esc. Under Mechanical . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. under Constraints. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. enter 170 L/s. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. for Flow. enter 2400. Also. type 6000. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. Click OK. move the cursor down. By copying the diffuser. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . As a result. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. and then press Enter. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. 11 Select the diffuser.

and then press Esc. clear Leader. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. 18 On the Options Bar.16 Using the same method. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

double-click System Type. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. for Sort by. 26 Using the method learned previously. under Available Fields. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. for Embedded Schedule. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Mark. and then right-click in the schedule. For Category. select Mark. Next. 29 Using the same method. mark. tile the windows. under Other. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and press Enter. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. under space 115. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Type. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 210 L/s. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. select Air Terminals. click Edit. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. type. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . for Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select 21. and Flow. 25 Click OK 3 times. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. it is a negative value. and click View Properties. 27 In the schedule.

and maximize Level 1 . 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. 31 In the drawing area. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. As you highlight the zone. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. as shown.Design.HVAC Plan .

verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 33 Click OK.7-18 kW . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. and under Energy Analysis.43 W (approximately 1.3 times the heating load). 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 36 In the drawing area.Horizontal .High Efficiency .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. select M_WSHP . 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 35 In the Type Selector.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.

the space crossing lines display. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. However. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design is highlighted. for Constraints ➤ Offset. and click View ➤ Systems. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. As you add diffusers to systems. including energy analysis. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.rvt. 6 Keep the System Browser open. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. enter . Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. After creating the logical connection. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT In the System Browser.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. click Training Files. and click OK. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. right-click the title. 44 Zoom in to space 115.HVAC Plan .

19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and the system connects them. 18 Click OK. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 12 In the System Browser. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. System Name. 17 Using the method learned previously. 15 Click Cancel. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. the number of elements is updated. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. the air terminals are the children. 11 In the drawing area. Connect Into. review the Number of Elements. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. On the Options Bar. and Flow value. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.

which updates the name in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.Rename the system Next. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. for System Name. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 22 Click OK. click Training Files. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 25 Click OK. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. under Mechanical. In this exercise. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. for Mark. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it.

For Offset. enter 3000.Design is highlighted. Also. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Flex Duct Round : Flex . the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. indicating that it’s the active view. A Generate Layout tab displays. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 On the Options Bar. Select Branch. In this case. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 3000. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. which provides various layout tools. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. For Duct Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 4 In the drawing area. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. click Settings. For Duct Type. For Flex Duct Type.Round. select the upper left diffuser. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and display solution 1. for Solution Type. 7 On the Options Bar.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Network. the Network type provides several solutions.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Plan. the space crossing lines display. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.

If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. Click OK. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 900. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For example. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. as shown.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. Either relocate the system components. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. as is the elbow itself. click Modify. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. you’ll get an error in a later step. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or manually modify the duct. 11 Click Finish Layout. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

The first time you press Tab. and click OK. Usually. highlight a segment of the main duct. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. If the entire network does not highlight. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and click to select it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . a disconnection exists.Flow. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. fittings. for Color Scheme. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. select Duct Color Fill . thus it is not part of the system. and equipment. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Using a flow-based color scheme.

and on the Options Bar. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical . but not all values are used in this view.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. for Values Displayed. select By View. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and then click OK. under Graphics. and press Enter. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the WSHP. and click OK. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. for Flow.Airflow. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 17 In the Type Properties dialog. select one of the diffusers in the system. 20 In the drawing area.

and select 400. and then click to select it.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. select Calculated Size Only. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select the color scheme legend. select Friction. and enter . and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. for Schemes. Select Restrict Height. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. for Branch Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. click Cancel. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. select Duct Color Fill . and then press Esc to clear the selection. and drag it to the right. Click OK. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Velocity. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select Only. Under Constraints. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 26 Click OK. Select the upper segment of main duct.65 Pa/m.

Use the information that displays (flow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. pressure. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.The ductwork and fittings are updated. and pressure loss. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. static pressure. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Using this tool.

Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. click Training Files. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.NOTE As you inspect a system. 35 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . also known as the critical path.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click Draw Duct.HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select the WSHP. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.

click the corner where the Top.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. NOTE When drawing duct. enter 3000. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 On the ViewCube.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . select the top right diffuser. and click Draw Duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Front. for Offset. double-click MEP . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. right-click the connector grip. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 11 On the Options Bar.3D MEP. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.

it is considered a closed loop. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. The ductwork is automatically created. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). in space 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 19 In the drawing area. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

24 Select the remaining diffusers. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. 25 Press Esc.22 Using the same method. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 30 Press Esc twice. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.

36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. such as a plenum. for Flow. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 40 Using the same method. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. select a segment of the main duct. under Constraints. and click OK. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.Airflow. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. and click to select it. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and then click OK. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. clear Restrict Height.

108 .

Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. 109 . additional water source heat pumps from level 1. on level 3 of the building model. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. you place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. including 2 base mounted pumps. In this lesson. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Then. Automatically and manually lay out piping. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating.

2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click Training Files.Horizontal High Efficiency .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. and select M_WSHP . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.7-18kW . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted. in corridor 328.Left Return . as shown.rvt.

verify that Wall faces is selected. as shown. 8 Click the corridor wall face. click the dimension. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. click the top edge of the WSHP.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. and click to place the dimension. and enter 600. 10 Select the WSHP. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 7 On the Options Bar.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.) 14 Click Modify. select the 2 WSHPs. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .11 Press Enter and then press Esc. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and in the Type Selector. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.

and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 2750. Under Mechanical.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. as shown. enter 0. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .75 L/s. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Water Flow. 21 Click Modify. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Click OK.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. You can create pipes to connect system components. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. but without a corresponding system. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). Creating a Piping System In this exercise. analyses cannot be performed.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. including flow and pressure.

IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Mech 330). indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.Design is highlighted. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. while pressing Ctrl. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 In the System Browser. Assigning a system component to an existing system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. In the System Browser. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. where it is easier to review the information. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. As you assign equipment to systems. right-click the Systems column heading. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. This display indicates that the system is selected. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. and click View ➤ Piping. select the 2 WSHPs. Therefore. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.HVAC Plan . the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. click Training Files.

Notice that on the Options Bar. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 12 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. and the Edit System tool is not active.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 10 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. for System Name. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. select the boiler.

You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and select the cooling tower. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.HVAC Plan . select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 25 Select the boiler. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click OK. and bypasses the cooling tower. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. In cooling mode.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 19 In the Project Browser. Creating a Piping System | 117 . under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).Design. 23 Close the roof plan view. double-click Roof . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. In heating mode.

The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click Properties. 32 In the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. expand Piping. for Water Flow. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Expand All. and click Select. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. indicating the logical connection. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Column Settings.8. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. enter 0. and click OK. 29 Right-click CHWS. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click OK. In the System Browser. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. under Mechanical. you can view several parameters. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. expand the Hydronic Return system category.

select Mechanical Equipment. indicating that it’s the active view. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.rvt. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 5 In the Filter dialog. When you draw a box to select components.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Check None. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you can place the cursor over a system component. and click to select it. click Training Files. press Tab to highlight the system.HVAC Plan . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). In the left pane of the Open dialog. the boiler. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.Mech 330). The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. then the Select a System dialog displays.Design is highlighted. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . A system preview displays in red. and click OK.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .

This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select CHWR. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 11 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. structural beams. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 13 Click Cancel. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. enter 450. duct. or architectural components. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . It does not reference the architecture. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. verify that Solutions is selected. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. select Perimeter. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. For Inset.9 In the Select a System dialog. 10 Click OK. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created.

With each Tab. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 18 Place the cursor over the piping.16 Click Finish Layout. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.75 L/s. 17 Optionally. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 19 In the drawing area. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. to display the path with thinner lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. and press Tab 3 times. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the flow for each WSHP is 0.

23 Under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties.50 L/s. under Mechanical. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that the value for Flow is 1. 24 Press Esc. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK.75 L/s).50 L/s.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0.

double-click Level 1 . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. On the Options Bar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 On the System Tools panel. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the Number of Elements is now 8. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 28 In the Project Browser. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. click Edit System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design.HVAC Plan .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 32 Click Finish Editing System. Logically. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).

44 L/s. you physically close the CHWR loop. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. under Mechanical. 35 Using the drag control. note that the value for Flow is 4. 38 Using the same method. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. Next. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. so the total flow of 6.50 L/s. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. access its instance properties. which propagates flow throughout the system. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.94 L/s. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.94 L/s.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and click Cancel. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. as shown. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . For Inset. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). select a WSHP. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 41 Click OK. 40 In the Select a System dialog. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 0. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Slope. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select Perimeter 1 of 5.00%.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. Click Settings. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWS. enter 450. and then click OK.

you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. as shown. (Both sections are at the same elevation. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In a later exercise. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 46 Click Modify. 47 In the drawing area.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Either relocate the system components. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 50 Using the same method. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. or offset elevations are incorrect. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. select a different layout solution. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click Finish Layout. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 .49 Select the 4-way arrow control. To create the piping system.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.HVAC Plan . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. indicating that it’s the active view. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown. As you work in the training file. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. double-click 3D Building. and the return pipes are magenta. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt.Design is highlighted.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view. as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. ■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection.

Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the lower one is secondary. The connections are automatically created. 13 In the plan view. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the boiler. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click Draw Pipe. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 12 In the 3D view.11 In the Select Connector dialog. select the return pipe riser.

for Offset. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 381. enter 600. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and you select 1 connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ Move the cursor down.In a plan view. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.

22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. select the primary base mounted pump.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. As you place piping runs that are close together. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and the appropriate fittings are created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 18 Press Esc twice. 19 In the plan view.

and click to draw the pipe. you select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and select it. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. as shown.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump.

and click to create the pipe. for Offset. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. and click Draw Pipe.28 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. enter 1200. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 If necessary. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

right-click the bottom control on the tee. as shown. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

enter 2850. and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .■ Move the cursor down. type 300. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset.

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. Next.37 Click Modify.

you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. which is rounded up to 3. 43 Press Esc. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. the value is 0 L/s. view the properties for the secondary pump. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 44 In the 3D view. and click OK. under Mechanical. right-click. notice that Flow is 6. The flow is being propagated through the piping. and click Element Properties. 48 In the plan view.44 L/s). 42 Click OK. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is .44 L/s. notice that under Mechanical. under Mechanical. In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 41 Using the same method. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. for Cooling Water Flow. as shown. 40 Click Cancel. right-click. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you create the pumps in parallel.50 or 50% of the Flow. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. Connect the cooling tower Next. 46 Press Esc.22 L/s (1/2 of 6.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. select the cooling tower. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

and close the dialog. 50 In the 3D View. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .44 L/s. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc. select the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.rvt. When the valve is open. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). click Training Files. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.52 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and is heated by the boiler. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . the water bypasses the cooling tower.

5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 8 Press Esc twice. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. The bypass valve is closed by default.4 On the Options Bar. and select M_Ball Valve . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 145 . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.

14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.10 Press Esc. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . place another M_Ball Valve .

15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow is 6.44 L/s. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. and click OK. Adding Valves | 147 . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Using the same method. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.

50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 6.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select M_Ball Valve . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. 20 Select the bypass valve. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.44 L/s. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. click Training Files. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. In heating mode. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.rvt. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.44 L/s. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select M_Ball Valve . Initially. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Using the method you just learned.

Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Pipe Color Fill .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . for Schemes. as shown. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. and click OK.Flow.Size. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.HVAC Plan . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Sizing Pipe | 149 . click Pipe Color Fill .

and click to select the branch. or manually modify the pipe. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps.5 m/s. enter 1. Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. or offset elevations are incorrect. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Select And. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Under Constraints. and enter 220 Pa/m. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 13 Press Esc. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Either relocate the system components. select Friction. for Branch Sizing. and for Velocity. select a different layout solution.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Inspecting the System | 151 . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views.14 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. and double-click 3D Building. pressure. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. click Training Files. Using the System Inspector.

This information helps you modify the system design. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. An inspection flag reports the section number. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. as shown. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. flow. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. as required. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Warnings display. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you need to validate them. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.4 Pa.1 Pa. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.0 L/s.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.Note that the Flow is 1. 9 Using the same method. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select 32° C. and double-click Level 3 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise.rvt. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . inspect Section 6 again. for Fluid Temperature. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and click OK. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 10 Click Finish. the Static Pressure is 41916. targeting those systems that need attention.HVAC Plan . and to size pipe.

the pipe is associated with that system. 12 In the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. and click Show to view all of the system components. right-click Hydronic Return. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 7 In the System Browser. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. After you assign components to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.HVAC Plan . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. double-click Level 1 . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. After you have assigned all components to systems. otherwise. and select Level 3 . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. and confirm unassigned system components. 9 Right-click CHWS. and click Expand All. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. As you learned when placing components.Design floor plan. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. In the System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder.Design. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. and click View. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 6 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . thus assigning the components to a system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. TIP If you have multiple views open. 10 Using the same methods. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. For example. click Close. right-click the Systems titlebar. and for pipe sizing. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 4 In the System Browser. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

156 .

157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting.

Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. click (Open). enter THHN. Select Correction Factor. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. enter 70. enter 1. ■ Click New Correction Factor. For Factor. expand Wiring . and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. select 90. Click OK. For Material. click Training Files.Wire Sizes. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. distribution systems. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and demand factors that are applied in the design.04. You also add a wiring type. select Copper. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. select Wiring Types. select Copper. For Temperature. speeding up the design phase. wiring. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you place components and create circuits.rvt. In this exercise you review electrical settings.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ ■ For Material. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature.

For Value. select Distribution Systems. enter 220. For Insulation. For Max Size. For Minimum. select THHN. For Wires.0. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. Select Neutral Required. Under More Than. Click OK. select Hot Conductor Size. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Conduit Type. select Power. enter 2000. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select 240. By specifying a range. For Neutral Multiplier.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Neutral Size. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For L-G Voltage. For Phase. select Steel. select Demand Factors. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. select Voltage Definitions. select Single. For L-L Voltage. enter 1. Click Split. select 120. For Maximum. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select 10000 VA. enter 240. enter 250. enter 240. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. enter 120/240. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. select 3. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. select 75. enter 50.

enter Required Lighting Level. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under the Electrical . 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. click (Open). Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. click Add. restrooms. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). select Electrical . and double-click Level 2 . Verify that Instance is selected. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. For Discipline. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m.Lighting. Under Categories. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Lighting Plan. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For Type of Parameter. For Group Parameter Under. Click OK twice. such as offices. Later in the tutorial. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. and conference rooms. select Illuminance. In this case the key style is the type of space and. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Lighting group in the space element properties. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.rvt. select Spaces. select Electrical. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels.

enter 485. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . under Available Fields. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Select Schedule Keys. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. under Electrical . 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. enter Space Lighting Requirements. select Spaces. double-click Required Lighting Level. and click OK. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Click OK. enter Open Office. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. enter Lighting Levels. and for Key Name. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.Lighting. For Name.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category.

for Sorting/Grouping. select Required Lighting Level. 22 Using the same method. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.Lighting Plan. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. change the sort order back to the default setting. click Edit. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that as you enter the data. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. which is mapped to project units. Select Blank Line. 21 Click OK twice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. select Instruction-Standard. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. 27 Click OK. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for Lighting Levels. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. In this exercise. click (Open). select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. under Identity Data. the value input applies only to the selected space. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Later in this exercise.

and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. for Name. and press ENTER. enter Required Lighting and click OK. enter 900. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. 00 lx still selected. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. verify the By Range is selected. and in the At Least column. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after.00 lx. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. for Title. select Spaces. enter 200. and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 500 lx. for Category.00 lx.00 lx. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. then the new value will be 400 lx. Select the scheme for 450. select Required Lighting Level. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx.00. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Color. For example. Select the scheme for At Least 20.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 800. and click (Add Value) five times. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter Required Lighting Levels. click Training Files. and click (Add Value). 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.00. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. click (Add Value) again. ■ Click OK.rvt. Under Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. and press Enter. click (Duplicate).

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Required Lighting. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. 8 In the drawing area. select Spaces. select Illuminance. select Spaces. For Color Scheme. For Discipline. and Required Lighting Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Average Estimated Illumination. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. enter Lighting Delta. Level. For Name. select Electrical. For Type. for Available Fields.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2 . double-click Number. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 13 Click Calculated Value.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser.Lighting CF. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Name. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

select Average Estimated Illumination. press the spacebar. for Test. select Lighting Delta. For Value. for Custom Colors. select Required Lighting Level. for Sort by. Click Conditional Format. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Level. Click OK. click Browse. under Condition. select Red.■ For Formula. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Not Between. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Blank Line. Click OK three times. type a hyphen. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Click Background Color. for Fields. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. On the Formatting tab. Select Header. and click Browse. for Formula. Click OK twice.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create a panel schedule. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Then. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. power circuits. 171 . as you place lighting fixtures. Create power loads. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. First. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Use the System Browser to check your design. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.

for the Spaces Category. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.rvt. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 2 In the drawing area. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Lighting CF view is open. In the Color dialog. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select the color legend. 8 In the Project Browser. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . for Basic Colors. click Training Files. select Orange.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Average Estimated Illumination. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. You can create additional color schemes. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click (Open). Under Scheme Definition. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By using orange as the color for this range. 7 In the Project Browser.Lighting Ceiling plan.

zoom to space Library 219. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 13 Click the Level 2 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. which is the lowest value in the specified range. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.

16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.the +/.5 fc range is satisfied.277V. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 19 Press ESC to end the command. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 18 Click to place the fixture. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. for Apparent Load. for Name enter and click OK. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ Under Electrical Loads. scroll to view space space Library 219.00 VA. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Name dialog.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. enter 162. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.

Click OK.93. and receptacles to your design. for Color Preset. In the Select File dialog. Placing Switches.00 lm. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. click the value for Initial Intensity. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.rvt. click (Open). Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. enter F15. 2 In the drawing area. select the top center fixture. ■ Click Apply.ies and click Open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. enter . 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. specify 15000. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Photometrics. select T5 [HO]. select 463T5_S. and Receptacles | 183 . The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. click the value for Initial Color. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Under Photometrics. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. and click OK.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Under Electrical. for Ballast Loss Factor. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. Under Photometrics. click Training Files. select Xenon and click OK.85. ■ Under Photometrics. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Type Mark. enter . for Lamp. select Luminous Flux. you add switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. ■ Click OK twice. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. junction boxes. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. 9 In space Library 219. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. In the next exercise.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .277V. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.

The element type M_Junction Boxes .NoLoad. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Select M_Junction Boxes .NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches.rfa and click Open.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. and Receptacles | 185 . 12 In the Load Family dialog. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Junction Boxes. 9 Press ESC to end the command. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Under Electrical. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter JB-1NL. NOTE When entering values. zoom to space Library 219. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 15 Select the junction box. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.14 Press ESC to end the command. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Edit Type. for Mark. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click OK twice. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.Offset. enter 2750. for Level 2 . note the Number of Poles is 1. 21 In the drawing area.

NOTE If necessary. 26 In the System Browser. Placing Switches. and Number of Elements. Expand General. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. right-click and click Column Settings. Space Number. Select Size. Space Name. Click OK. and Voltage. 24 For any column. 23 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Junction Boxes. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Receptacles | 187 . This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Distribution System. Select Load.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

31 Close the System Browser. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 .The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. move the cursor along the wall.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

Junction Boxes.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).208V MCB . click Training Files.rvt. and work toward the higher voltage. click (Open). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. zoom to the space Electrical 220. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface: 100A. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog.equipment. 2 In the drawing area.

for Max. select 120/208 Wye. Click OK. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . For Panel Name. 15 On the Options Bar. enter PP-2B.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. 8 Select the panelboard. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 480/277 Wye.480V MCB . for Max. enter 20. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Loads. For Panel Name. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Distribution System. 14 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Click OK. enter LP-2B. 9 On the Options Bar. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 23 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. which is the logical connection between the elements. and for Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. click Check None. Click OK. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 20 In the drawing area.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.

37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 38 Press ESC to end the command. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch.

Loads. click Check None.39 Using the same method. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. and for Category. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. for Hot Conductors. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. select Wires. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. enter 2. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. and create permanent wiring. Click OK. except without wire. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click (Open). 42 In the Filter dialog.rvt.

right-click on the Systems heading. and Voltage Drop are selected. Expand Electrical. Rating. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 13 In the System Browser. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Voltage. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. expand Power. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Distribution System. and verify that Load. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Click OK. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and then expand circuit 1. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. change the Voltage to 277V. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 30 Close the System Browser. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical. Click OK. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Click Tags.

for Type Mark. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click Yes. select Break. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click Edit Type. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 47 In the drawing area. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click OK. under Identity Data. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 40 Click OK twice. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. click below the first one to place it. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. enter FR4. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . For Circuit Number.

and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. and click Apply. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. 54 Select all of the tags. click Check None. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 52 In the Save As dialog. click Training Files. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down.rfa. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. for File Name. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Click OK. 57 In the Filter dialog. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Click Save. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Next you create a switch system. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click (Open). Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. enter a comma.

8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. for Switch ID.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. enter a. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Click OK. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 9 Select the occupancy sensor. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. under Electrical Lighting. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.Lighting. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. under Electrical . 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. Click OK. for switch ID. enter b. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

click Training Files. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. under Electrical . 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and click Element Properties. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. select the PP-2B panel. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 7 In space Electrical 220. click Check None. lighting. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Next you create a circuit and size wire. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and for Category. click (Open). and data systems. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Click OK. Circuits are used for power. enter 2.Loads. select Electrical Fixtures. for Hot Conductors. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.

Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. and click Open. 19 Click OK. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click to select the circuit. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the right pane. select Wiring. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark.13 Select the wire again. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark.

click the connector of the first receptacle. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 26 Press Delete. in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. Creating Power Loads | 209 . as shown. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select the PP-2B panel.

Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Next you balance the loads for your design. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.

Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. for Rating. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. After re-balancing loads. Click OK. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Finally. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 1-#12. enter 30A. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 1-#10. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Under Electrical-Loads. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Rebalance Loads. Scroll down. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m.rvt. 3 In the Electrical space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select panel LP-2B. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 2 In the drawing area.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Had there been a greater imbalance. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. the distribution is shifted. zoom to space Electrical 220. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Open. 6 Click OK. 1-#12. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. click Training Files.

20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 12 Select panel PP-2B. enter 25A. under Electrical . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. for Rating. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. under Electrical . 17 Close the warning dialog. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Next you create a panel schedule. 14 Close the warning dialog.Loads. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. for Rating. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. enter 40A. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select the transformer TP-2B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 24 Click Select Panel. and click Finish Editing Circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.Loads.

The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Under Header Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. enter 5 mm. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Appearance. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Font Size. The Panel Schedule Report displays. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. click (Open). expand Sheets (all). Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. enter 4 mm. for Font. Select PP-2B. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click Training Files. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise.Panel Schedules. Under Header Text. 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit.rvt. and open E601 . Click OK. 10 Click OK twice. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. select Bold and Italic. select Berlin Sans FB. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 4 Close the report. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Font Size. Under Body Text. under Other.

6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. click Training Files. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click (Open). Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. each with a load of 180VA. select space Lounge 212. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit.rvt. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Expand Unassigned. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. press TAB once.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.

16 Close the details dialog. In the System Browser. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 15 In the dialog. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Checking Your Design | 215 . 20 On the Options Bar. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. select MDP-1. under Warnings. for Panel. zoom to space Electrical 214. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the drawing area. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

and click OK.Sanitary. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . 4 In the Name dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 219 .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. you create a PVC pipe type.Plumbing Plan . In this lesson. and click Properties.Vent. click Training Files. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a pipe size. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise.rvt. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . right-click PVC . click Duplicate. in addition to loading existing families.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. type PVC . and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. planning is critical to a successful design.Design is open.

DWV: Standard. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.Vent is listed. enter 10°. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 15 For System Type.Sch 40 . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and click Main.293 mm.000 mm.PVC . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.006 mm. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. for Material. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Tee. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select None. enter 46.rfa. select Tee. enter 54. select Branch. click Pipe Settings. Cross. select Plastic. select M_Tee Sanitary . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Sanitary.5 In the Type Properties dialog. enter -1250.DWV: Standard. enter 45. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. under Mechanical.DWV. for Nominal. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select Sanitary. click Training Files.PVC . 13 In the right panel. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 10 On the Selection panel.PVC . click Modify. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.Sch 40 . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Tap. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 27 For the new pipe size. 22 Click New Size. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 17 In the left pane.Sch 40 . For Offset. 18 For System Type. under Pipe Types. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 25 For Outside. 24 For Inside Diameter. and open Metric\M_Trap P . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 6 Click OK. In the Project Browser. and click OK. 26 Click OK. 21 In the right pane.

Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. including plumbing fixtures. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the cold water system. add a hot water heater. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. Create the hot water system. 221 .

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

a toilet. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. as shown.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . for example. A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK. select one of the components in the system. The base is placed. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select Sanitary 107. 16 In the Select a System dialog. at the midpoint of the detail lines.

enter -350 mm. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Slope. select Intersections.Sanitary. You accept this suggested solution.Sanitary. for Diameter. enter -1225. select Branch. 23 For Pipe Type. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. for Solution Type. and modify it to meet project requirements. The default settings are automatically modified. select PVC . and for Offset. enter 1. 29 On the Options Bar. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and click OK. 30 Click Modify. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. enter -350 mm. 25 In the left pane. 21 On Options Bar. 24 For Offset. and click Settings. 28 On the Options Bar. select Main. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.19 On the Options Bar. select PVC . click Solutions. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select 100 mm.05%. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 26 For Pipe Type. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 27 For Offset.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.33 In the 3D view. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 34 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.

36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Overall. select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

adding sinks in the men’s room. and check the slope control.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. as shown. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

Public. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.Rectangular. in the Type Selector. and verify that Level 1 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. as shown. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under M_Lavatory . select 560 mmx560 mm . 5 On the Placement panel.

9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.2. select Multiple. 8 Select the sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. and press Enter to create a second sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify. enter 711. On the Options Bar.

238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.2. enter 711. click Add To System. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 15 Click the 3 sinks. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.

Design ➤ 3D Views. as shown. 20 Select the fitting. 21 Select the tee. double-click 3D Plumbing . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 19 In the 3D view. click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser.16 On the Edit System panel.Overall. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. use the ViewCube to orient the view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.05%. for Offset. 24 On the Options Bar. for Slope. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). press Spacebar. and click Apply. enter 1.22 In the plan view. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 26 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe. 27 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. enter 760 mm. with the tee fitting selected. When you press the Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . move the cursor over the stub pipe.PVC . and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting. 31 Click Modify.DWV. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 30 In the 3D view. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 29 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 . select Standard.

34 Press Esc. zoom in to the double wye fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. In the next steps. you add pipe segments to the double wye. for Offset.33 With the fitting selected. on the Options Bar. right-click the right connector. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. and click Draw Pipe. enter 305 mm. 37 Select the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 40 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.

Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 150 mm. 46 In the section view. and press Esc. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector. 47 Move the cursor down. 48 Click Modify.

select the P-Trap on the left. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. 51 In the Type Selector. 55 In the 3D view. 53 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. 52 In the plan view. select Standard. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. under M_Trap P . 56 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.PVC .Sch 40 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.

The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click Modify.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. 58 Using the same method. enter 150 mm. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Select the double wye pipe on the left. and click Draw Pipe. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Move the cursor to the left. In the plan view.. select the left P-Trap. connect the right sink to the double wye. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

under Pipe Types. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Press Esc. select PVC Sanitary.■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select the section of pipe you just drew. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. In the Type Selector.

you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. adjusting the sanitary stack.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. for Slope. 62 On the Options Bar.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. verify that 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Finish. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.05% is selected. and verify the slope. click Training Files.

as shown. select Standard.PVC . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click Draw Pipe. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 7 On the Selection panel. select the vertical stack.Sch 40 . 10 In the 3D view.DWV.Design. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 9 In the Type Selector. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Floor level line. right-click the top connector. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. and click to draw the pipe. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Overall. click Modify. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Plumbing Plan . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select the elbow fitting on the right. 5 Select the tee. 3 In the Section view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and click Duplicate. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 267 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If the tutorial training files are not present. 2 Right-click Standard. In this tutorial. click Training Files. You create a new pipe type.autodesk. However. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. After finishing each exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. In this lesson. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. go to http://www. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work.

select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. structural beams. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 6 In the Project Browser. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. select Carbon Steel. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Next. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. under Mechanical. verify that 2800 is selected. duct. you modify the type properties of the pipe. or architectural components. In this exercise. select Main. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. For Offset. In the left pane. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. click Rename. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For System Type. and click Properties. For Offset. 9 Click OK. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Material. verify that 2800 is specified. you create project parameters and work with schedules. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Pipe Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the next exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. However.

Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. enter Sprinkler Zone. the space crossing lines display. under Fire Protection. Under Categories. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Fire Protection.Fire Protection Piping Plan . for Sprinkler Zone. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design is highlighted. 8 Using a crossing window. select space Instruction 221 as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click OK twice. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select the upper half of the building. enter Zone 1. click Training Files.rvt. and click Element Properties. select Spaces. For Group parameter under. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. right-click.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the drawing area. and then click OK. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. click Add. When you highlight a space using the cursor. for Name.

12 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 13 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Zone 1. and then access instance properties. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. verify that only Spaces are selected. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. you create schedules for sprinkler design.rvt. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. to which you add various parameters. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Training Files. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Sprinkler Zone. for Sprinkler Zone. 10 In the Filter dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter Zone 2. and click OK. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. including a calculated value parameter.

and on the ribbon. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Obstructed-Combustible. 11 Click OK twice. click the Formatting tab. click Add Parameter. For Group parameter under.Fire Protection Piping Plan . enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. enter Light. enter Maximum Spacing. For Type of Parameter. 9 On the Formatting tab. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 14 Select the new header.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Spaces. enter Protection Area Construction Type. For Units. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select mm. For Name. select Millimeters. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.Design is highlighted. 7 Click OK. select Maximum Spacing. double-click on each column separator. For Rounding. select Fire Protection. The schedule displays. select 0 decimal places. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. and click Field Format. 6 Using the same method. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 10 In the Format dialog. For Key name. indicating that it’s the active view. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Unit symbol. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select Length. Select Schedule keys. Click OK.

Click OK. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. For Name. select Spaces. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. enter 40. enter 4575. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Extra. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Combustible Extra.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Schedule. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . Click OK. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. In the Fields dialog. and click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Minimum Sprinklers. click . 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Formula. and click Field Format. For Discipline. select Area. select Number. Enter the formula operator / after Area.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 22 Click OK twice. For Type. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Common. under Available fields. select 0 decimal place. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Units. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Rounding. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Fixed. The Sprinkler Schedule displays.

At the bottom of the dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Sprinkler Zone. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Then by (second instance). 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header and Blank line. and then select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. Select Header and Blank line. select Hidden field. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. select Grand totals. for Sorting/Grouping. For Fields. select Level. and click View Properties. For Fields. for Sort by. select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. click Edit. 26 Click OK 3 times. and then click Field Format. For Then by. under Other.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and select Totals only.

34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Filter by. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Available fields. and click View Properties. click Edit. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and Count. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and click View Properties. 30 Click OK twice. for Fields. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. System Name. and select Totals only. Under Field formatting. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Filter. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell.27 In the drawing area. select Sprinklers. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. For Category. for Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . right-click the schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Count. delete the word Maximum. select Level equals Level 2. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. click Edit. On the Formatting tab. select Grand totals. double-click Type. select Calculate totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area.

41 In the plan view. for Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Ordinary. 48 In the floor plan. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select space 221 Instruction. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. As a result. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and access the instance properties. Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 43 Click Cancel. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. double-click FP . Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. select Light. 52 Click OK. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click OK. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. Unobstructed.Fire Protection Plan Design. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 44 In the schedule.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you can choose to save your work. If the tutorial training files are not present. By following the recommended workflow. However. As you create the system. As you place the sprinklers. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.rvt.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2 . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. go to http://www. At the end of this tutorial. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will understand the process. click Training Files. methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 279 .

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When this happens. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. After placing the initial sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When there is a small misalignment. 3 In the Project Browser. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. as shown. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. select the sprinklers that you placed. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. 10 Press Esc twice.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 9 In space Instruction 202. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 13 On the Options Bar. Also. and 207. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 206. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 11 In the drawing area. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers. verify that Constrain is cleared. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.

Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. specify a vertical offset. 17 In the Project Browser. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. as shown. 18 Type WT. and then press Esc. 200B. you place non-hosted sprinklers. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. you place non-hosted sprinklers.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. open Design ➤ FP . and 200C). and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. Next.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

enter 11. for Offset. and with piping (physical connection). This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and press Enter. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.FP_Ceiling view. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.0. Notice that the schedule updates. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. In this exercise. and click Element Properties. 25 Click OK. In the next exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. move the cursor to the right.19 In the floor plan. After creating the logical connection. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. This number is determined in the schedule. under Constraints. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 29 Press Esc. enter 2900 mm. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. you adjust the offset. enter 4100. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Next. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Number.

2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 5 Right-click the header. indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Design is highlighted. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. as shown. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. click View ➤ Systems. and select Piping. However. As you assign sprinklers to systems.Fire Protection Plan . 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Unlike logical connections (systems). 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files.

select an initial piping layout. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Next. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. press Tab. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and select the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. In the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. named Fire Protection Wet. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and click Select. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. within the Piping Systems folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 11 With the system still selected. indicating the logical connection.

select 150 mm. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. verify that 2800. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name.0 is specified. 14 Click Finish Editing System. When the layout is finished. and a piping layout preview displays. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. click Solutions. 13 In the System Browser. as shown. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 22 On the Options Bar. In the left pane. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. for System Name. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Wet is selected. click Settings. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .The Edit Piping System panel displays. system equipment. 23 For Offset. and number of elements in the system. 15 In the drawing area. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. For Pipe Type. enter -3650. 19 Click OK. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and on the Options Bar. for Diameter. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Place Base. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that Main is selected. enter FP Wet_Zone2. For Offset. select Branch. providing system editing tools. 24 On the Generate Layout panel.

The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and green represents branch lines). and select solution 4. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. In general. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. click Modify. On the Generate Layout panel. A (parallel movement control) displays. verify that Network is selected. Creating a Piping System | 287 . The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. select a different layout solution. as shown. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 29 Click Finish Layout.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. Either relocate the system components. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . or manually modify the pipe. 32 If necessary.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and select the elbow fitting as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in. and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.33 Close the file with or without saving it. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then you create piping to physically connect them.rvt.Fire Protection Piping Plan . the Connect Into tool. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. Next. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 3 If necessary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. mechanical equipment. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Finish Editing System. or a system component to display system tools. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 8 In the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. radiators. and pipe or duct is created. air terminals. 5 In the drawing area. and so on) are logically connected by a system. click Add To System. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. you can select the pipe or duct. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel.

12 On the Options Bar. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. for Solution Type. 20 Open Design ➤ FP .11 On the Generate Layout panel. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 21 In the Piping Plan. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 14 Close the System Browser. 23 View the result in the 3D view. verify that Solutions is selected. and select solution 5. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 13 Click Finish Layout. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. verify that Network is selected. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and then tile the views. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 18 Click Finish Editing System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier.

Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and click Draw Pipe. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and then press Esc. 28 In the drawing area. select 2800. for Offset. right-click. 27 On the Options Bar.24 In the Piping Plan. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 25 Select the sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Using the same method. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe.

Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. indicating that it’s the active view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . 31 In the plan view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Because the whole system highlights. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar.Fire Protection Piping Plan . select 1 : 50. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Scale. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

8 Right-click. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. double-click on the section head to open the section view. and click View Properties. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. select Design. for View Name.Design. For Default View Template. 10 In the Project Browser. select FP . and click Apply Default View Template. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . and press Enter. Click OK. and then click Modify.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. drag the top section boundary line up. For View Classification. 14 Select the tee fitting. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Make Level 2 . and select Hose Reel Cabinet . enter FP Section_Stair. Under Identity Data. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Design the active view. and then right-click the top connector. 22 In the drawing area.Fire Protection Plan . and click Draw Pipe.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. right-click Design ➤ FP . 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 17 Move the cursor up. for Sub-Discipline. 12 If necessary.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select MEP Section. enter 2135.

select . 25 Verify that Fire Protection . zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). and click Draw Pipe. 26 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down.23 In the section view. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then click Modify. 24 Select the cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. for Diameter. verify that Automatically Connect is active.

as shown.29 Close the section view. and click Open. 31 In the alert dialog. click Yes to load a family.rfa. 33 In the Type Selector. 32 In the Open dialog.50 mm is selected. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and then click Modify. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . verify that M_Gate Valve . A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.

and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. 6 In the Filter dialog. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). height. select 25mm. or height. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. for Diameter. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 8 Click Modify. or width. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Changing the diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. width. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. and click OK. click Check None. 4 In the floor plan view. width. 7 On the Options Bar.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Press Esc. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. NOTE Tags are view specific. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. . By hiding the linked file. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and after each segment highlights. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 17 On the View Control Bar.rfa. Clear Leader.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. click to place the tag. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click Open. 12 If necessary. select the linked architectural file. They display only in the view in which they were placed.

press Tab. The main piping is selected and displays in red. for Diameter. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. and when the section highlights. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . select 100mm.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 21 On the Options Bar.

select 40mm. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. The pipe diameter is modified. for Diameter. 23 Close the 3D view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 26 Using the same method. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and then tag the piping as shown. and maximize the floor plan. as shown. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 24 In the drawing area. 25 On the Options Bar.

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this exercise. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You added tags to pipes. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files.

304 .

add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 . create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. matchlines. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and view references. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 307 . If the view included detail graphics. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. dependent views. and apply a view template. click Training Files. and click Properties. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. right-click Copy of Level 1. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click OK.rvt. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then press Esc. and click Rename. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 10 In the drawing area. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 7 Close the file without saving. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . more focused. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation.rvt. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and click OK. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. and click OK. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. views and put them on the sheet. 4 Using the same method. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

For Line Pattern. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click the current value. and then press Esc. In the Color dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. For Line Weight. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select Double Dash . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 19 In the drawing area. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select black. Click OK. select 11. and click OK. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.

for Target view. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 21 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .20 Select the upper view reference and. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. on the Options Bar. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 25 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.

You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and select the section box. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click 3D Plumbing. select Plumbing Isometric. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom to each of the view references. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 27 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and click Properties. for View Name. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet.Domestic Water. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . enter Plumbing Isometric .rvt. For Default View Template.

right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click to select it. 6 In the Project Browser. select Dash. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. for View Classification. select Documentation. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. For Sub-Discipline. and then click OK.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Domestic Water. For Pattern. 10 Right-click. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. select 3. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. The section crop lines no longer display. Click OK. and click Apply Default View Template. Click Apply. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Plumbing.

13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. and click to select it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. 15 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown).14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe.

On the View Control Bar. specify Plumbing . 18 Label the fixtures as shown. Click in the drawing area to start a text label.5mm Arial. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .Sanitary Waste. select 1. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 19 Using methods learned previously. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . click on the Format value. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. and for Default View Template. and in the view properties. verify that Common is selected. For Slope. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.16 Press Esc.Isometric. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and in the Type Selector.

26 Press Esc twice. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 22 Click OK twice.rvt. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then place the callout view on a sheet. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. for Rounding. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. as shown.■ In the Format dialog. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 10. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. click Training Files. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. you use a plan view to create a callout view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. When the view is associated with a sheet.

4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. for Scale. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. select 1 : 50. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). Creating Callout Views | 317 . Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.

for Line Weight. drag it to the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and select the viewport. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. using the same method.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Sheets (all). Click OK. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . double-click M601 . Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select 5. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Expand the Callout Boundary category and.

17 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter WSHP PART PLAN. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click the callout view. for View Name. Creating Callout Views | 319 . and click Apply Default View Template. For Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Title on Sheet. Click OK. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Creating Callout Views | 321 . and click Rename. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. right-click the detail view. under Names. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

322 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. symbols. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 323 .Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. work with model-based components. duct tags. linetypes. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m.rvt. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. Creating Annotations In this exercise. as shown. and annotation to create a legend. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes.

use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 8 With the text still selected. and select 1. 9 Press Esc twice. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. verify that Leader is cleared. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click Right Straight. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. a return diffuser. as shown. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a segment of round duct. Creating Annotations | 325 . select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.

Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 24 On the Options Bar.17 Click Modify. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. clear Leader. 22 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. and click Open. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. as shown. If necessary. under Category. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. for Ducts. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 25 In the drawing area. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. and click OK.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. click Load.

26 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. Creating Annotations | 327 . 32 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Leader. and then press Esc. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and Attached End. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.

select Free End. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 34 In the drawing area. 36 Press Esc twice. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. as shown. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

select the last tag placed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 40 Using the method learned previously. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. click Training Files. 39 In the Type Properties dialog.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Creating Dimensions | 329 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. for Leader Arrowhead. lay out. indicating that it’s the active view. and all elements of that type are affected. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. you use temporary dimensions to locate. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. not simply an instance property. That’s because you changed a type property. 37 In the drawing area. and click OK. and lock lighting fixtures. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.

You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. and then select the interior face of the wall. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 13 Press Esc. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 Using the same method. select the dimension line. On the Options Bar. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 12 Click EQ. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.

20 Using the same methods. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press Enter.9). you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Because the dimensions are locked. annotation symbols.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2430. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. 17 Press Esc. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and notes. and offset them from the wall. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework.rvt. click Training Files. Creating a Legend | 331 .

Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 10 Using the same method.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select Floor Plan.200 Neck. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. For Scale. For View. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser .Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select 1 : 50.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click below the title to place the diffuser. and select 1. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click in the drawing area. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. enter Diffuser Legend.

click next to the top diffuser. and select 1. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Creating a Legend | 333 . 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.

23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 26 Press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. and then press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.DROP and its text note. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 21 Press Esc.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Select the component’s break line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

30 Select Spot Elevation . 35 Change the text on the right to N. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. and then click Modify. Creating a Legend | 335 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. enter E. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select Title w Line . 40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

and text. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A drafting view using detail components. 337 .113 East elevation view. detail groups. A detail callout that references another view.Detailing 15 In this lesson. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.

Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. place Power Riser . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Next. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and then modify and align the views. 7 Drag the Power Riser .113 East on the sheet.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. clear Leader. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click to place it.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 5 In the drawing area. 8 Using the same method. select each of the 2 panelboards. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.

Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. for Title on Sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.9 Press Esc. right-click. giving the appearance of a single view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and click Deactivate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Activate View. 13 Right-click. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data.

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. you add wiring to the diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. 22 Press Esc. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. In the next exercise. right-click. and click Activate View. and select Title w Line . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 19 Select the Level 1 line. as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.

9 Beginning at the transformer. as shown.rvt.113 North view. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . verify that Chain is selected. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar. 2 Close the Project Browser. As you draw. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Electrical Power. expand Lines. notice that there are no snaps active. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. In the Line Styles dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. click New. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. In the New Subcategory dialog. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. and then click OK. for Name. for Line Weight. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and click OK. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). select 6. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. Under Modify Subcategories.

for Offset. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. enter 3mm.

17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 29 Click Modify. select Multiple. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 28 Click above the cap. 33 On the Options Bar.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

for Offset. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.0. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and press Enter. change the length of the bottom line to 3. and then press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 42 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 7. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. enter 12. enter 3. You enter exact values for each line length. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. you can ensure that they stay together. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 40 Press Esc. Using the same method. click on the length dimension value. Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. while pressing Ctrl. 50 With the group selected. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 54 Select the group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. select all 3 lines. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 51 Using the method learned previously. for Name. expand Groups ➤ Detail. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 46 In the Project Browser. enter Ground. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click OK. 47 In the drawing area. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and then press Esc. TP-2B. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 52 Select the detail group.

and will place it on sheet E01. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 59 Close the file with or without saving it. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. In later exercises. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally.

Back. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. click Home. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . for Name. 4 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and Left sides converge. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). click Training Files. select 3D Views. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 On the ViewCube. and click Rename. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m.rvt. and double click Typical Make Up Air. and click Apply View Template. and then press Esc.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Right-click the copy. 3 Select the section box. Walkthroughs. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and then click the corner where the Top. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.

Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.■ ■ Under Names. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and click to specify the second leader point. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Click OK. Move the cursor down and to the left. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select 3D HVAC Iso. Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point.

18 Press Esc. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Complete the text labels. as shown. and under Extents. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. To rotate and reposition a text label. under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and then click OK. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 23 Click on the crop region. as shown.

26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. 30 On the View Control Bar. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. click Training Files. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and click Deactivate View. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . clear Crop Region Visible. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 29 Right click the view. 32 In the Instance Properties. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet.25 Click OK. and click Activate View. and under Extents. and click View Properties. scroll down. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. Place a detail component. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.rvt. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 33 Right-click the view. select Crop View and Section Box.

Click OK. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 Zoom in to the component. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 13 In the drawing area. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. select Plumbing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. as the rectangle start point. For Scale. as shown. click the point at the top of the drain. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Sub-Discipline. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Click OK. select Documentation. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 12 On the Element panel. right-click the view name. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. For View Classification. and click Properties.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 3 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 5.

17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area. and click OK. select C. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.I. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .P. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 22 Click Modify. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. and then press Esc.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. for Type. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 18 With the filled region still selected. 20 Select 1.

34 Press Esc. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 28 Click Modify. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click to select them. (Line). select Multiple. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select the filled region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 23 In the drawing area. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.

37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 40 Click Finish Region. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

D.. for Name. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 49 Click Modify. enter Flashing Membrane_F. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. press Tab to highlight the chain. draw wide detail lines as shown. select the Flashing Membrane group. (Rectangle). and click OK. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. and then click to select them. as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 45 Using the method learned previously. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. press Spacebar twice. 61 Using the same method.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. as shown. 55 Press Esc. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and use the grips to resize the masking region. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.62 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. 64 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.

74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 76 To select the leader start point. 81 Select the text note. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point. 80 Press Esc twice. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. select 15000 (Division 15 . and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 72 If necessary. and click to specify the second leader point.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 71 Click Modify. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and then click OK.70 In the Keynotes dialog.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 90 Press Esc.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the view title. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to place it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . and then press Esc twice.

364 .